Dell 5324 Switch User Manual

2004 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-27
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ......... 1-47
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-56
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-11
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-13
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-16
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-37
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-42
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-25
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-41
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-30
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-51
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-60
Tires
...................................................... 5-61
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-89
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-97
Electrical System ...................................... 5-97
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
.... 5-103
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem are registered trademarks
and the name VIBE is a trademark of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 04VIBE A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 05/05/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-26
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-26
Child Restraints .............................................1-27
Older Children ..............................................1-27
Infants and Young Children ............................1-29
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-36
Top Strap ....................................................1-36
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-38
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System) ......................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System ...............................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-44
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-47
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-50
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-52
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-53
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-53
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-54
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-56
Restraint System Check ..................................1-56
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-56
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-57
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body, to make sure
the seat is locked into place.
Don’t put anything under the front seats. Items under
the seats could keep the seats from locking into
place properly.
1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Reclining Seatbacks
Turn the knob located on
the outboard side of the
driver’s seat cushion
to adjust the height of the
driver’s seat.
It is easier to use the adjuster when the seat is
unoccupied. Make sure the ignition is off and the vehicle
is in PARK (P) before adjusting the seat.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the
seatback where you want it. Push on the seat to
make sure it’s locked into position. Pull up on the lever
without pushing on the seatback, and the seat will
go to its original upright position.
1-3
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Head Restraints
Passenger Folding Seatback
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflating
air bag might force that object toward a
person. This could cause severe injury or even
death. Secure objects away from the area in
which an air bag would inflate. For more
information, see “Where Are the Air Bags?”
and “Loading Your Vehicle,” in the Index.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
You can also fold the front passenger’s seatback down
to allow for more cargo space or as a temporary
table while the vehicle is stopped.
Press the release button near the base of the restraint
to lower and raise the restraint to a comfortable
position.
1-5
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position and
make sure the seatback is at the most upright
position and locked.
2. Pull up on one of the
levers located on either
side of the back of
the passenger’s
seatback.
3. Fold the seatback down.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it into
place. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted or
caught in the seatback.
2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it
is locked into position.
3. Use the reclining front seatback lever to adjust the
seatback to a comfortable position.
1-6
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Rear Seat Operation
You can fold either side of the seatback down for more
cargo space. The rear right side seatback can also
be used as a temporary table while the vehicle is
stopped. Make sure the front seatback isn’t reclined or
in the rearward most position. If it is, the rear seatback
won’t fold down all the way.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-7
To fold either seatback down, do the following:
1. Pull up on the lock
release knob, located
on the top of the
seatbacks.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
2. Fold the seatback down. Each seatback can be
folded separately.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it into
place. Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or
caught in the seatback.
2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it
is locked into position.
1-8
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-28.
1-9
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-11
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the
use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get
the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Lap-Shoulder Belt
This part is only for people of adult size.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
1-14
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-15
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the
height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered
on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
6. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to
take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the
retractor.
1-16
To move it down, squeeze
the button and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide. After
you move the adjuster to
where you want it, try to
move it down without
squeezing the release
button to make sure it has
locked into position.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
1-18
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
1-20
The belt is twisted across the body.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Rear Seat Passengers
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
1-22
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s
how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the buckle does not click, check to be sure
that you are using the correct buckle. The buckle
for the center rear passenger position has the word
CENTER on it.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-23
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-24
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to
take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-25
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe crash in
which the front of the vehicle hits something.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-57.
1-26
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-27
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
1-28
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This
applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-29
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the
vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-30
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults and
older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
1-31
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
1-32
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-33
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-34
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-35
Where to Put the Restraint
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here’s why:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-36
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per anchor.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under
it. See Head Restraints on page 1-5.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location
Anchor the top strap to one of the top strap anchors.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seating
positions. You will find three top strap anchors in a
covered compartment on the floor of the rear cargo area.
1-38
To access the anchors,
open the compartment
doors marked with
the child restraint anchor
symbol.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) for both outside rear seat positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-39
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-40
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a label on the seatback at each
lower anchor position. To assist you in locating
the anchors for this child restraint system, place your
hand in a palm-up position and reach up between
the seat cushion and the seatback, just under the label.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” in
the Index for information on how to secure a
child restraint in your vehicle.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-36. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap
on page 1-36 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-42
3. Buckle the belt. If the buckle does not click, check
to be sure that you are using the correct buckle.
The buckle for the center rear passenger position
has the word CENTER on it.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap on page 1-36 if
the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
1-44
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-45
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-46
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
This part explains the frontal and side impact
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) or air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact air
bags – a side impact air bag for the driver and
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
If your vehicle has side impact air bags, it will say
SRS-SIDE AIR BAG on a label on the side of the driver’s
and right front passenger’s seat closest to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-47
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The side impact air bags for the driver and
right front passenger are designed to inflate
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly – whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep
youin position for air bag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with frontal air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Front occupants should
not lean on or sleep against the door.
(Continued)
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither
thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-30
for more information.
1-49
Where Are the Air Bags?
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-50
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag is
in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
1-51
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts,
or in many side impacts because inflation would not help
the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
1-52
It is possible that, in a crash involving the front of your
vehicle, only one of the two frontal air bags in your
vehicle will deploy. This is rare, but it can happen in a
crash just severe enough to make a frontal air bag
inflate.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules.
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door.
frontal air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and
many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s
motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and
rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never
be regarded as anything more than a supplement to
safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
1-53
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module – the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback
closest to the door for the driver and right passenger’s
side impact air bags – will be hot for a short time. The
parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags.
Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
1-54
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with two electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Additionally, your vehicle has
two sensors which detect side impacts. These
sensors signal the appropriate side air bag to inflate.
Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash sensing
and diagnostic module, which records information
about the frontal air bag system. The module
records information about the readiness of the
system, system status and the driver’s and
passenger’s safety belt usage at deployment.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water – such as
water up to the carpeting or higher – or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag
controller can be soaked and ruined. If this ever
happens, and then you start your vehicle, the damage
could make the frontal and side impact air bags
inflate and safety belt pretensioners activate, even if
there’s no crash. You would have to replace the
air bags, all the sensors and related parts, parts of the
safety belt system and parts of the driver and right
front passenger’s seatbacks. If your vehicle is ever in a
flood, or if it’s exposed to water that soaks the carpet,
you can avoid needless repair costs by turning off
the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the battery
cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any
circumstances. See your dealer for service.
1-55
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
{CAUTION:
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag systems. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-56
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passengr’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in a
collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-57
✍ NOTES
1-58
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8
Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................2-9
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................2-9
Windows ........................................................2-11
Manual Windows ..........................................2-11
Power Windows ............................................2-12
Sun Visors ...................................................2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-13
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-13
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-20
Manual Transaxle Operation ...........................2-23
Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-30
Parking Your Vehicle .....................................2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-35
Outside Remote Control Mirrors ......................2-36
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Storage Areas ................................................2-37
Glove Box ...................................................2-37
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-37
Coinholder(s) ................................................2-37
Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-37
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-37
Floor Mats ...................................................2-37
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-38
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-40
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ...............2-40
Cargo Cover ................................................2-41
Sunroof .........................................................2-42
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to
have a new one made easily using this code.
If you need a new key, contact your dealership to obtain
the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6 for more information.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of trouble
getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys
inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to
get in. So be sure you have spare keys.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes
the key tag from the key and gives it to the first owner.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
LOCK: Press this button to
lock all of the doors.
UNLOCK: Press this button once to unlock the driver’s
door. The turn signal lights will flash twice and the
interior lamps will come on to confirm that the door has
unlocked. If the UNLOCK button is pressed again
within three seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
The interior lamps will stay on for 15 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on. If the UNLOCK button is pressed
and no door is opened, the doors will lock automatically
after 30 seconds.
HATCH: Press this button for a few seconds to open
the rear liftglass. If the ignition key is in the ON position,
the liftglass cannot be opened by the HATCH button
on the transmitter.
The turn signal lights will flash once to confirm that the
doors have locked. The remote keyless entry system
will not operate while the doors are open, the key is in
the ignition or if the liftglass or hatch are not completely
closed and latched.
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery, do the following:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
1. Insert a small coin or similar object to separate the
bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces upward. For battery replacement, use
a three-volt battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
3. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter, if equipped. See Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To manually lock the door from the inside, press the
knob on the door forward. To unlock the door, press the
knob rearward. If you have manual locks, you must
use the key to lock and unlock the liftgate.
2-7
If your vehicle has power door locks, open the driver’s
door by turning the key in the lock toward the rear of the
vehicle. Turning the key back toward the center, then
toward the rear again will unlock all of the doors. Using
the key in the passenger’s door will also unlock all of
the doors.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that help prevent passengers from opening the rear
doors on your vehicle from the inside.
The security locks are
located on the inside of
the rear door trim.
Lock a door by turning the key toward the front of the
vehicle. If you have power door locks, all the doors
will lock.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power door
lock switch is located
on the armrest on the door.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Slide the lever down.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
e (Power Door Lock): Press the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door to lock
or unlock all the doors at once.
2-8
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
To open a rear door with the security lock, do the
following:
Liftgate/Liftglass
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults and
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to
open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how these security locks
work, and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
2. Slide the lever up.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. If you must drive with the
liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-9
Liftgate/Liftglass Release
To open the liftgate using your key insert the key into
the keyhole and turn the key counterclockwise.
Raise the liftgate by hand.
Use the handle in the center of the liftglass to help in
lifting the glass.
When closing the liftgate, you can use the handle to pull
it down.
To lock the liftgate, turn the key clockwise to the first
position.
To open the liftglass using your key insert the key into
the keyhole and turn the key clockwise to the second
position.
2-10
You can also release the
liftglass by pressing the
release button (if equipped)
located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
2-11
Power Windows
If your vehicle has this
option, the switches
controlling the driver’s
and passenger’s windows
are located on the
driver’s door.
The power window switch on each passenger door
controls that window only. These switches work while
the ignition is on.
For the front windows, press the front of a switch to
lower a window and lift the front of the switch to raise a
window. For the rear windows, the power window
lever is located on each door below the arm rest.
2-12
AUTO (Express-Down): Press this switch all the way
down and release it to lower the driver’s window
quickly.
Lock-Out: Press the
window lock-out button,
located next to the driver’s
power door lock switch, to
disable the passenger’s
power window switches.
Press the button again to
enable the window
switches.
The driver can still control the left front passenger
window with the lock-out button pressed.
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent Systems
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them to the side.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
The visors can also be extended for more coverage.
Swing the visor down and to the side and then slide the
visor out to extend it. Do not extend the visor when it
is in the forward position, only when it is at the side
of the vehicle.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Swing down the driver’s sun visor and lift the cover to
expose the vanity mirror. The passenger side of
the vehicle also has a vanity mirror. Swing down the
visor to expose the mirror.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has this feature, the theft-deterrent
system is designed to activate an alarm if any of the
side doors or the liftgate is forcibly unlocked or if
the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected while the system is set.
The alarm will sound the horn intermittently and flash
the headlamps, turn signal lamps and interior lights.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors are
unlocked forcibly, the other side doors and the liftgate
will be locked automatically.
2-13
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and
remove it.
2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the side doors and liftgate with
the key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The indicator light located
on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel will come on when
all the side doors and
liftgate are closed
and locked.
4. After the indicator light starts flashing, you may
leave the vehicle.
Do not leave anyone in the vehicle when you set
the system, because unlocking the vehicle from the
inside will activate the system.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm, do the following:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described in the previous
procedure. The side doors and liftgate should
be locked with the key or remote keyless entry
transmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
3. Unlock the driver’s door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described in the disarming
procedure.
The system will be automatically set after 30 seconds.
When the system is set, the indicator light will start
flashing.
2-14
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors. Also
check that the system is activated when the
battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it
checked by your dealer.
How the System Alarm is Activated
Reactivating the System
The system will activate the alarm under the following
conditions:
Once the system is set, it will automatically reset the
alarm after the alarm stops. The alarm will activate again
under the same conditions as described earlier.
• If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is unlocked
or if any of the other side doors or the liftgate is
forcibly opened without the key or remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• If the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
• If the ignition is hot-wired.
• If the side window glass is broken or damaged.
The indicator light will come on when the system
is activated.
Disarming the System
The alarm can be disarmed by doing one of the
following:
• Turn the ignition key from LOCK to ON.
• Unlock any of the side doors with the key or with
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If the liftgate or liftglass is opened with the key, the
system will still be activated.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors are
unlocked without using the key or remote keyless entry
transmitter, the other side doors and the liftgate will
be automatically locked again.
After one minute the alarm will automatically stop and
the indicator light will start flashing again.
2-15
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to four
different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Don’t drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
2-16
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering
wheel left and right while you turn the key hard.
Turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool
to force it could break the key or the ignition switch.
If none of these works, then your vehicle needs
service.
(A) LOCK: This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. This locks your steering wheel,
ignition and automatic transaxle. Push in the ignition
switch as you turn the key toward you.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switch
can’t be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is in
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK and removing it will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer
the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you
need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key only to ACC. Don’t push
the key in while the vehicle is moving.
(C) ON: This is the position the switch returns to after
you start your engine and release the switch. The switch
stays in the ON position when the engine is running.
But even when the ignition is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories (including
the ventilation fan and 115 volt power outlet) and
to display some warning and indicator lights.
(D) START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
to operate some of your electrical accessories.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is still in ACC or LOCK and the
key is in the ignition.
(B) ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some
of your electrical accessories (such as the radio, but
not the ventilation fan). It unlocks the steering wheel and
ignition. To move the key from ACC to LOCK, push in
the key and then turn it to LOCK.
2-17
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in neutral and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down – that’s a safety feature.
Starting Your Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
2-18
can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15
seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition
key to START. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t
“race” your engine when it’s cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater, if equipped, can help. You’ll get
easier starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged
in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the
coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord
located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the front.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-19
Automatic Transaxle Operation
There are several
different positions for
your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-20
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot
shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever, push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and
release the shift lever button as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting
Out of Park (P) on page 2-30.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine
is racing.
Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’t
covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 27 mph (43 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 29 mph (47 km/h) or more, push your
accelerator pedal all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
2-21
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than
DRIVE (D) but lower fuel economy. You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
LOW (L): This position gives you even more power
than SECOND (2) but lower fuel economy. You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle won’t shift into
low gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.
Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle. Also,
if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your
brakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
Overdrive Off
Your automatic transaxle
has an O/D (overdrive off)
button. It is located on
the left side of the
shift lever.
Press the O/D button to turn off overdrive. A light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on when this
feature is used. Press the button again to turn overdrive
back on. Then the light on the instrument panel
cluster will go off. See Overdrive Off Light on page 3-39.
Use this feature for better fuel economy. Fast starts
use the most fuel while gradual starts give you the best
fuel economy.
When you turn on your vehicle the overdrive will
automatically be on until you turn it off.
2-22
Manual Transaxle Operation
Five-Speed
First (1): Press the clutch
pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let
up on the clutch pedal
as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle your
engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the
clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Five-Speed Transaxle
Shift Pattern
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the
shift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) while
your vehicle is moving could damage your
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty.
Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brake
for parking your vehicle.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
2-23
Six-Speed
FIRST (1): Press the clutch
pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let
up on the clutch pedal
as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Six-Speed Transaxle
Shift Pattern
2-24
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the
shift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal. If you’ve come to a complete stop
and it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2), put the shift lever
in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into SECOND (2).
THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and upshift into
THIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the
clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5), SIXTH (6): Shift into
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same
way you do for THIRD (3). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) while
your vehicle is moving could damage your
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
neutral.
Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brake
for parking your vehicle. There is an audible beep when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) to ensure that FIRST (1)
gear and REVERSE (R) are not confused.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle your
engine.
2-25
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
This chart shows when to shift to the next gear for the
best fuel economy.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Engine
1.8 L
(Code 8)
1.8 L (Code L)
1 to 2 or
2 to 1
15 mph
(24 km/h)
15 mph
(24 km/h)
2 to 3 or
3 to 2
25 mph
(40 km/h)
25 mph
(40 km/h)
3 to 4 or
4 to 3
40 mph
64 km/h)
40 mph
(64 km/h)
4 to 5 or
5 to 4
45 mph
(72 mph)
45 mph
(72 km/h)
5 to 6 or
6 to 5
—
50 mph
(80 km/h)
If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the
next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good
performance.
2-26
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-34.
2-27
Shifting Into Park (P)
3. Hold in the button on
the shift lever.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
• Push the lever all the way toward the front of the
vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
If you have an automatic transaxle do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake by pulling up on the parking
brake lever.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) as follows:
2-28
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your automatic transaxle vehicle
with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means
that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-29
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
automatic transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park
(P) on page 2-28.
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle it has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have
to fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See
Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-20.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P)before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-30
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Make sure the parking
brake is applied.
2. Carefully pry the
shift-lock override
small, round cover from
the floor-shift console,
located to the right
of the shift lever.
Parking Your Vehicle
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever
into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking
brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into
REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can
turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and
release the clutch.
If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-34.
3. Insert the end of a flat-tipped tool into the circular
slot and press down firmly.
4. While maintaining brake application, move the shift
lever into the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
2-32
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Repairs weren’t done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
CAUTION:
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
2-33
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Winter Driving” in the Index.
2-34
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer,
also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
The inside rearview mirror is attached to your vehicle’s
front windshield glass. If you do not have a sunroof,
your vehicle’s inside rearview mirror may be equipped
with reading lamps. If your vehicle is equipped with
this mirror, there are two buttons located on the bottom
of the mirror. Press the buttons to turn the lamps on
and press them again to turn the lamps off.
To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps will
automatically turn off when the key is in the ACC
or LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20
minutes or more. The lights will come on when any of
the doors are opened or if the key is turned to the
ON position.
The mirror moves so that you can adjust it up and down
or side to side. You can adjust the mirror for day or
night driving. Pull the tab for night driving to reduce
glare. Push the tab for daytime driving.
2-35
Outside Remote Control Mirrors
These controls are located
to the left of your steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
To adjust either mirror, push the button labeled L (left)
or R (right). Then use the arrows on the control pad
to adjust the mirror.
Once you have adjusted both mirrors, move the selector
switch back to the center. This prevents moving the
mirrors accidentally once you have adjusted them.
2-36
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box door, lift the latch. Always keep
the glove box door closed while driving.
Cupholder(s)
There are two fixed cupholders located in the console
area between the two front seats. There are also
two cupholders that fold out of the rear of the console
storage unit.
Coinholder(s)
Your instrument panel has a coinholder located to the
left of the steering wheel.
Instrument Panel Storage Area
Center Console Storage Area
A storage area is located in the console between the
seats which can hold CDs, cassettes or a cell phone.
There is also an accessory power outlet located in
the storage area.
To access the upper tray of the storage area, raise the
console box lid without touching the lock release
lever. To access the lower storage area, pull up the lock
release lever while raising the lid.
Floor Mats
Your vehicle’s floor mat is specially designed to remain
in position under your feet and out of reach of the
accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held in
place by two locator hooks.
Be sure the driver’s side floor mat is properly placed on
the floor so that it does not block the movement of
the accelerator pedal.
There are storage compartments located on the
instrument panel in two places. They are below the
interior/instrument panel brightness dial and below the
shift lever. Pull the top of the door toward you to open it
or for the compartment below the shift lever, push the
button to open it.
2-37
How to Remove and Replace
the Floor Mat
To remove the floor mat,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect it
from the locator hooks.
To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the locator hooks and push down
into place.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has sliding crossrails and side rails
that are attached to the roof to secure cargo.
Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your
luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment.
These are available through your GM dealer.
2-38
Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than
75 lbs. (34 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle. When you carry large things, never let
them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. When loading cargo, be sure it rests on the
crossrails and does not scratch or damage the
vehicle.
To adjust the position of the crossrails, do the following:
1. Turn the eight knobs counterclockwise to loosen
the crossrails.
2. Slide the crossrails to the desired position for
loading the luggage.
3. After adjusting the crossrails, be sure to tighten all
the knobs by turning the knobs clockwise.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main weight
as far forward as you can and move the rear
crossrail as far forward as possible to keep the load
from shifting.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-32.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
2-39
Rear Storage Area
A storage area is located under the rear cargo area
floor panel.
Turn the two lock knobs on
the floor panel to unlock
the storage area
access cover.
Rear Cargo Accessory Track
System
Your vehicle has a track system located on the floor of
the rear cargo area. This system can be used to
carry accessories in your vehicle in many ways by using
the tie-down anchors provided in your vehicle or
accessory packages available from your dealer.
Make sure the cargo being carried in the rear cargo
area is secure. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Be sure to lock the access cover to close it securely.
2-40
Cargo Cover
Cargo Tie Downs
To use the cargo cover, attach the side hooks of the
cargo cover to the upper tie down hooks located along
both sides of the rear cargo area.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
The tire tie-down belts are designed to secure the flat
tire. You can also use the belts and hooks to secure
your luggage.
There are eight tie-down hooks located in the rear of
the vehicle. The belts are located under the cargo area
floor panel. To use the belts, hook the ends to the
lower tie-down hooks in a criss-cross pattern across the
cargo. Pull on the belts at the buckle to tighten the
belt as needed.
2-41
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a sunroof, you can tilt or open it. To
tilt the sunroof, slide the sunshade rearward, then
press the switch marked UP. Press the other end of the
switch to lower the sunroof. Your ignition must be on
for the switch to work.
2-42
To open the sunroof, press the SLIDE arrow that points
to the rear of the vehicle. To close it, press the other
arrow that points to the front of the vehicle. The sunroof
will close partially and stop. Once the sunroof stops
you will have to release the switch and press the button
again to completely close it. You can open the sunroof
to any position. The sunshade will open when the
sunroof is opened.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-14
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-23
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Tachometer .................................................3-28
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-31
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-31
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-34
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-38
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-39
Overdrive Off Light ........................................3-39
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-39
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-39
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40
Audio System(s) .............................................3-41
Setting the Time ...........................................3-41
Radio with CD ..............................................3-42
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-52
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-63
Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-63
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-64
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-64
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-64
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(United States Only) ..................................3-64
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
3-2
The main components of your instrument panel are the
following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-26.
C. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-4.
D. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-41.
E. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Climate Control System on
page 3-19.
F. Front Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light. See
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-28.
G. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
H. Power Remote Control Mirror Button. See Outside
Remote Control Mirrors on page 2-36.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
“Instrument Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps
on page 3-14.
J. Rear Liftglass Release Button. See Liftgate/Liftglass
on page 2-9.
K. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 2-37.
L. Content Theft-Deterrent Security Light. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-13.
M. Storage Compartment. See Instrument Panel
Storage Area on page 2-37.
N. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
O. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
P. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-5.
Q. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5.
R. Cruise Control Lever (Option). See “Cruise Control”
under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
S. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-16.
T. Windshield Wiper Lever. See “Windshield Wipers”
under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
U. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
on page 3-19.
V. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
W. Power Outlet. See Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current on page 3-18.
X. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
Y. Center Console Storage Area. See Center Console
Storage Area on page 2-37.
Z. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-37.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning
button is located on the
center of the instrument
panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
To sound the horn, press anywhere on the horn pad on
your steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering column allows you to adjust the steering
column before you drive. You can also raise it to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
The tilt lever is located
underneath the steering
wheel column.
The turn signal/multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
This lever operates the following:
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass
For more information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12.
To tilt the column, move the lever downward. Adjust the
steering wheel to a comfortable position, then move
the lever upward to lock the column in place.
3-5
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has an upward (for right) and a
downward (for left) position. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
The headlamps must be on for this feature to work.
For high beams, push the turn signal lever away
from you.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
It will go off when you switch to the low beams.
To switch back to low beams, pull the lever
toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
If you signal a turn or a lane change and notice the
arrow flashing rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, have it replaced to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-98.
3-6
With the lever in the low-beam position, pull the lever
toward you to momentarily switch to high beams
(to signal that you are going to pass). If you have the
headlamps on when you release the lever, they will
return to the low beams.
Windshield Wipers
LO (Low): Move the lever to LO for steady wiping at
low speed.
HI (High): Move the lever to HI for steady wiping at
high speed.
MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe.
REAR: To turn on the rear window wiper, twist the end
of the lever upward. The wiper does not work with
the rear liftglass open.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
controls the windshield wipers and washer.
The available positions are the following:
OFF: The wipers are off.
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose a
delayed wiping cycle. In light rain or snow, you might
want to use this position rather than continuous wiping.
You can change the time between wipes by turning
the INT TIME band. Turn the band forward or rearward
for longer or shorter delay interval.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-7
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
Pull the lever toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The spray will continue until you release the
lever. The wipers will run a few times. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-39.
To squirt washer fluid on the rear window, twist the knob
upward and downward as far as it will go. The knob
automatically returns from these positions after you
release it. You can twist the lever downward to create a
large flow of water on the rear window, then twist the
lever back up to wipe the window. This feature is helpful
to quickly clear the rear liftglass when very dirty.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-8
The cruise control lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
• Cruise control can be dangerous where
•
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you’re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Press the ON-OFF button at the end of the cruise
control lever. The CRUISE light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on. See Cruise Control Light
on page 3-39 for more information.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Move the lever down to SET/COAST and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-9
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This will shut off cruise
control. But you won’t need to reset it.
Unless you’re going less than 25 mph (40 km/h) you
can push the lever up to RES/ACC
(Resume/Accelerate). You’ll go right back up to your
chosen speed and stay there.
The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if the
vehicle speed goes below 25 mph (40 km/h). If your
preset speed cancels out at speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h), there may be a problem with your vehicle’s
cruise control. See your dealer.
3-10
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Move the lever down to SET/COAST.
Release the lever and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise lever up to RES/ACC. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and then
release the lever.
• To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the lever to RES/ACC briefly and then release
it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Push and hold the lever to SET/COAST until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the lever
down briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake or downshifting to SECOND (2) or
LOW (L) takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the
clutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.
• Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button again.
• Pull the cruise control lever toward you.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased. The set
speed memory is also erased when the vehicle speed is
less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
3-11
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp switch has three positions:
OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off all
lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
O (Parking Lamps):
Turning the switch to this position
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
•
•
•
•
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of the
lever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps.
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamp
Instrument Panel Lights
3(Headlamps): Turning the switch to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Turn the switch to OFF to turn off the lamps.
- (Fog Lamps):
You can also use the control lever
to turn on the fog lamps. They will come on only
when the headlamps are on low beam.
3-12
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic light sensor
on the top left corner of the instrument panel, so be
sure it is not covered or the headlamps will be on
continuously.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your low-beam headlamps
at the normal brightness along with other lamps such
as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and
instrument panel lights. The parking brake must be
released for the automatic headlamp system to work.
This is indicated by the headlamp symbol on your
instrument panel cluster.
If you are driving through a parking garage, overcast
weather, or a tunnel, the automatic headlamp system
may turn on your low-beam headlamps at a normal
brightness along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking
lamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights
will be dimmer, and the instrument panel cluster lights
may dim. There will be a delay of several seconds before
the lights will turn on when starting the car at night.
Headlamps On Reminder
If you turn the ignition to LOCK or ACC and leave
the lamps on, you’ll hear a tone when you open the
driver’s door.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on with the engine running,
• the exterior lamps switch is off and
• the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on
at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.
When you turn the exterior lamp switch to the headlamp
position, your DRL will go off and your headlamps will
come on. The other lamps that come on with your
headlamps will also come on.
3-13
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
See “Automatic Headlamp System” earlier in this section.
When you turn the exterior lamp switch off, the regular
lamps will go off and your headlamps will change to the
reduced brightness of DRL provided it is not dark
outside. DRL also comes on if only the parking lamps
are being used.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off.
3. Turn the ignition back on.
The DRL will stay off until you release the parking
brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-14
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The instrument panel
brightness control is
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights will
decrease when the headlamps are on. It is recommended
that the brightness level is kept at the maximum setting
for all daytime driving to insure proper visibility.
The interior light has the following positions:
OFF: This position turns the light off.
ON: This position keeps the light on all the time.
6 (Door):
This position turns the light on when any
of the side doors, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened.
The light goes off when all the side doors, the liftgate
and the liftglass are closed.
Entry Lighting
While the instrument panel brightness control is in the
door position, the light will come on when any side door,
the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. After all the side
doors, liftgate and liftglass are closed, and the key is out
of the ignition, in LOCK or ACC, the light will remain
on for about 15 seconds and then go out except under
the following conditions:
• The ignition is turned to ACC or ON after all the side
doors, the liftgate and the liftglass are closed.
• All the side doors and liftgate are locked when the
liftglass is closed and the light is still on.
When any side door is unlocked with the key or remote
keyless entry system transmitter, the light comes on
for 15 seconds, even if the door is not opened.
To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps
will automatically turn off when the key is in the
ACC or LOCK positions or if the key is removed
for 20 minutes or more.
3-15
Reading Lamp
If you have a sunroof, you will have a reading lamp
near the sunroof switch. Press the button to turn
the lamp on and press it again to turn it off.
3-16
If you do not have a sunroof, your vehicle’s inside
rearview mirror may be equipped with reading lamps.
If your vehicle is equipped with reading lamps, there are
two buttons located on the bottom of the mirror. Press
the buttons to turn the lamps on and press them again to
turn the lamps off.
To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps will
automatically turn off when the key is in the ACC
or LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20
minutes or more. The lights will come on when any of
the doors are opened or if the key is turned to the
ON position.
Accessory Power Outlets
With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console storage area.
To use the outlet, the ignition must be in ON or ACC.
Pull down the small cover to access the outlet.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 15 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your battery.
Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer for additional information on the
power accessory plugs.
3-17
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
With this power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary electrical
equipment with a maximum limit of 115 VAC. If you
try to use equipment that requires more than the limit, a
protection circuit will cut the power supply. The power
will automatically restart when equipment that operates
within the limit is plugged in.
The power outlet is located near the center of the
instrument panel. Before using the outlet, turn on the
ignition and press the button next to the outlet.
An indicator light in the button will come on. After using
the outlet, press the button again to turn it off.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and they may not work properly:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage:
cathode-ray tube type televisions,
compressor-driven refrigerators, electric
power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable items
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire.
Climate Control System
To use the lighter, push the lighter in all the way
and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back
out by itself. If the engine is not running, the key
must be in ACC to use the lighter.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
It is not recommended to use the cigarette lighter to
plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Use the accessory
power outlet for phones and other electrical equipment.
See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-17 or Power
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current on page 3-18.
Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Your vehicle has a removable ashtray that sits in your
front cupholder in the center console storage area.
Operation
9 (Fan):
Turn the center knob away from OFF to turn
the system on. Turn the knob toward HI to increase
fan speed.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter may
need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-23 and
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-7.
3-19
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the upper
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs the air to the upper
instrument panel outlets, and to the floor outlets.
6(Floor):
This mode directs the air to the floor outlets
and to the outboard outlets (for the side windows).
? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button, located in the center of the instrument
panel to the left of the audio system, to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. When the button is pressed,
an indicator light in the button will come on. Press the
button again to turn off recirculate and to circulate
outside air through the system. The indicator light will
go off. Recirculate is automatically turned off when
the climate control system mode knob is turned to defog
or defrost or is between modes.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-20
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button, located in
the center of the instrument panel to the left of the audio
system, to turn the air-conditioning system on or off.
When A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the button will
come on to let you know that the air conditioning is
activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to clear
fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger
button is located on the
center of the instrument
panel, above the audio
system. The defogger does
not operate with the rear
liftglass opened.
- (Defog):
This mode directs the air between the
windshield, side windows, instrument panel outlets and
the floor outlets. The air-conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting without pressing
A/C, unless the outside temperature is at or below
freezing.
1 (Defrost):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield, instrument panel outlets and the side
windows. The air-conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting without pressing A/C, unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON.
=(Rear Defogger):
Press the defogger button to turn
the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light
in the button will come on to let your know that the rear
window defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as
much snow from the rear window as possible.
3-21
The rear window defogger will turn off automatically
approximately 15 minutes after the button is pressed.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you
do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a
decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located
in the center and outboard
sides of the instrument
panel, to change the
direction of the air flowing
through the vents.
3-22
Operation Tips
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information,
see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter” following
and Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-7.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The access panel for the air filter is behind the glove
box. To replace the filter, follow these steps:
Passenger compartment air, both outside and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment air filter. The filter removes certain
contaminants from the air, including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early. An air filter is available through
your dealer. For how often to change the air filter,
see Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-7.
1. Lower the glove box door and remove the screw on
the right side of the glovebox with a tool. Slide the
arm of the glovebox off.
2. Push each side of the glovebox in and pull
toward you.
3-23
3. Lift the snaps on the filter cover to remove
the cover.
4. Remove the air filter.
5. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
If you choose not to replace the air filter after removing
it, using your vehicle without a filter won’t cause
damage.
3-24
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly- and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They’re a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, how much fuel is left in the tank and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
United States Cluster Shown, Canada Similar
3-26
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometers
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in miles.
The trip odometers can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed.
If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set
at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to
show the old mileage reading when the new odometer
was installed.
The button located on the
right side of the instrument
panel cluster allows you
to switch between the
odometer and the two trip
odometers.
Press the button once to switch to TRIP A and again to
switch to TRIP B. To return the display to the odometer
reading, press the trip odometer button again.
To set the trip odometers to zero, press and hold the
knob on the right side of the instrument panel.
3-27
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The tachometer shows
engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also flash until the driver’s
belt is buckled. If the
driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Notice: Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer in the red area, or engine damage
may occur.
Temperature Display
The outside air temperature is displayed on the center
of the instrument panel, within the speedometer.
The display will show the outside air temperature in
Fahrenheit with a range from -22°F to 122° F
(−30°C to 50°C).
3-28
Your vehicle also has a safety belt reminder light for the
right front passenger position.
This light is located on the
center of the instrument
panel, above the audio
system.
When the key is turned to ON or START, this light will
come on as a reminder for the right front passenger
to fasten the safety belt. The safety belt light will flash
until the right front passenger’s safety belt is buckled.
The passenger’s safety belt reminder light will not
illuminate if the right front passenger’s belt is already
buckled or if a sensor does not detect the weight
of a passenger in that seat.
If something is placed on the right front passenger’s
seat, the sensors in the seat may detect that object and
cause the right front passenger’s safety belt reminder
light to come on. If this ever happens, move the object to
the rear seat or place it in a rear storage area, if at all
possible.
3-29
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) on page 1-47.
This light will come on for
about seven seconds
when you start your
vehicle. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-30
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on or keeps
flashing after you start your vehicle, it means
the air bag system and safety belt pretension
system may not be working properly. The air
bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash,
or they could even inflate without a crash.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should come on for about
seven seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is
not running, as a check to
show you it is working.
Then it should go out when
the engine starts.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may
have a problem with the electrical charging system. It
could indicate that you have a loose generator drive belt
or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the charging
system light on, be certain to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this light should
come on when you turn the key to START. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-31
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-32 and Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-30.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
3-32
United States
Canada
With the anti-lock brake system, the light will come on
when your engine is started and may stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-31.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is
too hot! It means that your engine has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-30.
3-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
3-34
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your
vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s
emission controls and may cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-35
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
3-36
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-37
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, the
Oil Pressure Light
light may blink on and off. This is normal.
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on after you start your
engine or come on when
you are driving.
This indicates that there is not enough oil pressure to
keep your engine properly lubricated and cool.
The engine could be low on oil, or have some other oil
related problem. Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations.
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with
the ignition on, you may have a problem with the
fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
3-38
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Cruise Control Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
The CRUISE light appears
whenever you use the
ON-OFF button to set your
cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-5.
This light will come on
when your windshield
washer fluid is low
(Canada Only).
Door Ajar Light
Overdrive Off Light
Your automatic transaxle
has overdrive. The light
will come on whenever you
turn off the overdrive.
See “Overdrive Off” under
Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-20.
This light will come on if
any door, the rear liftgate
or the rear liftglass are
not completely closed.
3-39
Fuel Gage
Here are five things some owners ask about. None of
these show a problem with your fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads F or full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill it.
• It takes the gage several minutes to read F or full
after filling the vehicle with fuel.
• The gage moves a little when you turn, stop or
speed up.
United States
Canada
Your fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your
tank. There is an arrow on the fuel gage that indicates
that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your
vehicle. The fuel gage works only when the ignition
switch is ON. When the gage first indicates E or empty,
you still have a little fuel left, about 1 or 2 gallons
(3.8 L or 7.6 L), but you need to get more right away.
When your vehicle is low on fuel the low fuel warning
light, located below the empty mark, will also come on to
remind you to add fuel.
3-40
• The gage doesn’t go back to E or empty when you
turn off the ignition.
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent
minutes.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM will also appear for morning
hours. Press and hold the minute button until the
correct minute appears on the display. The time may be
set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display.
3-41
Radio with CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
Your radio has a blinking red light that is used as a
theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever your
ignition is off.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-42
XM™ Radio Satellite Service
(USA Only)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The
display will show your selection.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): This button is
inoperable on this radio.
w SEEK x:
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), push this button
while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows
for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN
and the preset number appear on the display. You
will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-43
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA
only, if equipped), by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
3-44
Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLAT
appears on the display will return all of the tone controls
to the middle position.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
bass, mid, and treble equalization settings.
You can set up to six customized equalization settings
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
desired EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will
appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): Press and release this button until
BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.
Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the
left or the right speakers.
FADE: Press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator will
light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.
Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type mode.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will be
displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two
seconds will return all speaker settings to the middle
position.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™)
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular station.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will be
displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same programming. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to
turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-45
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
RDS Messages
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have
factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return, if program type select mode
is activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
3-46
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. When
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
Your radio will also interrupt the play of a cassette tape or
a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: Your audio system has been calibrated
for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that your radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned to the dealership for service.
3-47
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-48
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-49
Playing a Compact Disc
Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc.
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when
the ignition is off, first press the eject symbol or push the
RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and
the ignition on, it will start to play.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8cm single
discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs
and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-50
\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a compact
disc. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a compact disc. See “EQ” listed
previously for more information.
w SEEK x: Press the down arrow while playing a
CD to go to the start of the current track if more
than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to
go to the next track. If you hold the button or press
it more than once, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through the disc.
w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the arrows for
more than two seconds until SCAN and the track
number appear on the display and you hear a beep.
The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next track. Press this button again
to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default on
the display (track and elapsed time), push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default. While elapsed time is showing, CD
TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
compact disc when listening to the radio. CD will appear
on the display when a compact disc is loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
Compact Disc Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-51
Radio with Six-Disc CD
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
Your radio has a blinking red light that is used as a
theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever your
ignition is off.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
3-52
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pressing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
To change the default on the display, press the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t:
1. Turn the radio on.
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
sSCAN t:
Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-53
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the left or the right speakers.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to zero.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will
adjust the display level to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose between bass, midrange and treble
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical program types.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or
speaker controls are displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the
AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,
midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.
3-54
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a PTY Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS
station will interrupt play if that selected program type
format is broadcast.
3-55
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have
factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular station.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-56
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. When
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if the
volume is muted or interrupt the play of a CD if the last
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and the
brackets are displayed.
Playing a Compact Disc
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8cm single
discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs
and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a know good CD.
Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
3-57
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact
disc player will hold up to six discs.
To insert one disc, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your
disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play
automatically.
To insert multiple discs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3-58
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green you can load another disc. The disc player
takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more
than six.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of
the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an
equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated
each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to
play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to
play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that
is playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
Disc Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of
this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.
To eject the disc that is currently playing, press
and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press
and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear
a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a
disc is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,
before the 25 second time period is complete, the
receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc
several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the
LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried
to push it in manually. The receiver’s 25-second eject
timer will reset at each press of eject, which will cause the
receiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second time
period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the
disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR knob off and
then on again. This will clear the disc-sensing feature and
enable discs to be loaded into the player again.
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
• To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
3-59
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one
of the following:
• To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn it off.
• To play the tracks on all of the discs that are
loaded in random order, press and hold RDM
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn it off.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a compact disc. For more
information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed
previously in this section.
sSEEK t:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
press the button more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the disc.
3-60
sSCAN t:
To scan one disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track and elapsed time), press the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
disc(s) is in the player.
Using Song List Mode
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or
more seconds to save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of pressing
SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to
confirm that the track has been saved.
If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST
FULL will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
3-61
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
3-62
Compact Disc Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have an AM-FM navigation radio
system that includes a Radio Data System (RDS) with
program type selections (PTY) that will seek out the kind
of music you want to listen to. The radio system can
also communicate with your navigation system to
broadcast announcements on traffic and emergency
alert communications. For information on how to use this
system, see the “Navigation/Radio System” supplement.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Navigation/Radio Display and Controls
The display screen is located in the center of the
instrument panel.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-63
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(USA Only)
XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-64
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the antenna base located on the roof of the vehicle.
If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System (United States Only)
Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM™ system may be affected
if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your XM™ system. Make
sure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-9
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16
City Driving ..................................................4-19
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow ...................................................4-28
Towing ..........................................................4-30
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-30
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-30
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-34
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you
drive after drinking. Please do not drink and
drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with
a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
4-6
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light on
the instrument panel will come on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system,
the anti-lock brake system warning light will stay on. See
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
4-8
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can not
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it
in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this by
pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock, it is different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System”
in this section.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
4-9
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
4-10
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-12
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-13
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-14
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Don’t drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-15
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-16
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-17
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-18
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-61.
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
4-19
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-20
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh — such as after a day’s
work — don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-22
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
They could get so hot that they would not
work well. You would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Always have your engine running and
your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to
be very careful.
4-24
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
distance on any slippery road.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow – drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-25
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats – anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-26
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-27
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-28
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-75.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery
hook. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-30.
Using the Recovery Hook
Your vehicle is equipped with a recovery hook. The
recovery hook is provided at the front of your vehicle.
It can only be used for pulling your vehicle out.
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-29
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
4-30
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-21.
Dinghy Towing
After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for more than
three minutes before driving the vehicle.
For front-wheel-drive vehicles with manual transaxles
only do the following:
When dinghy towing, be sure to follow the posted legal
speed limit.
1. Put the shift lever in neutral.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC to avoid locking the
steering wheel. Make sure the audio system is
turned off and that nothing is plugged into the
power outlets.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your vehicle
could be badly damaged and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
3. Release the parking brake.
4-31
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Loading Your Vehicle
If your vehicle is a front-wheel drive vehicle it can be
towed using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly,
follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for automatic transaxles
and in neutral for manual transaxles.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-32
This is an example of what your vehicle’s Tire-Loading
Information/Certification label might look like. It is
located in the glovebox and shows how much weight
your vehicle may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation pressures
for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important
information about the number of people that can be
in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry.
This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight,
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly. If you
have fold-down rear seats, you’ll find four
anchors on the back wall of your trunk.
You can use these anchors to tie down
lighter loads. They’re not strong enough
for heavy things, however, so put them
as far forward as you can in the trunk or
rear area.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Don’t leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-33
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
4-34
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-35
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-36
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10–15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label located in the glovebox.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Then be
sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
• Don’t let the steel in a hitch contact the aluminum
on your bumper. If you do, the two will corrode.
You can use something like paint or plastic tape to
separate the steel and aluminum. The same
steel to aluminum problem can happen with
fasteners too.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-33. Dirt and water can too.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And, if you have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both systems won’t work well, or at all.
4-37
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch, platform and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-38
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transaxle overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into gear for
a manual transaxle, yet. When parking uphill, turn
your wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic
transaxle or REVERSE (R) for a manual transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-39
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-30.
4-40
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-23
Manual Transaxle Fluid ..................................5-25
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-26
Engine Coolant .............................................5-27
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29
Engine Overheating .......................................5-30
Cooling System ............................................5-32
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-39
Brakes ........................................................5-40
Battery ........................................................5-44
Jump Starting ...............................................5-45
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-51
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52
Headlamps ..................................................5-52
Front Turn Signal Lamps ...............................5-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-55
Rear Combination Lamps ...............................5-56
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-58
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-59
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-60
Tires ..............................................................5-61
Inflation — Tire Pressure ...............................5-67
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-70
Buying New Tires .........................................5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-73
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74
Tire Chains ..................................................5-75
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-77
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-88
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ............................................5-89
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-89
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-92
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-92
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-94
Finish Damage .............................................5-94
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-95
5-2
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-97
Electrical System ............................................5-97
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-97
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-98
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-98
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-103
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-28.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-97.
5-4
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 1.8L engine (VIN Code 8), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or
higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive
uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary.
If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
If your vehicle has the 1.8L H.O. DOHC engine
(VIN Code L), use only premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane of 91 or higher. In an emergency,
you may be able to use a lower octane — as low
a 87 — if heavy knocking does not occur. Refill your
tank with premium fuel as soon as possible. Otherwise,
you might damage your engine. If you are using
91 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Don’t smoke if
you’re near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames and smoking materials away
from fuel. Don’t leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-7
The fuel door release lever
is located near the floor
under the driver’s seat on
the outboard side.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill your
tank, and wait a few seconds after you’ve finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-92.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap inside of the
fuel door.
5-8
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-34.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you’re refueling, don’t
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the release handle
inside the vehicle. It’s
located below the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering
wheel.
4. Release the hood prop
rod from its retainer
and put the hood prop
rod into the slot in
the hood. To insert the
hood prop rod into
the slot, move it
straight up. If it is
moved to the side or
toward the inside of the
vehicle, it may
become detached.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle. Release the
secondary hood release by pulling up on the
lever located near the middle of the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Make sure to return the hood prop rod
carefully back in its retainer before closing the hood to
avoid damaging the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood of the 1.8 L (Code 8) engine, you’ll see the following:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-39.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-29.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Hydraulic
Clutch on page 5-26.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98.
5-13
When you open the hood of the 1.8 L (Code L) H.O. DOHC engine, you’ll see the following:
5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-39.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-29.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Hydraulic
Clutch on page 5-26.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98.
5-15
Engine Oil
If the engine oil pressure
light appears on the
instrument cluster, it
means you need to check
your engine oil level
right away.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 3-38.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
1.8L (Code 8) Engine
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
5-16
1.8L (Code L) Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the hole at the tip of the dipstick,
then you will need to add at least one quart of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-101.
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-18
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommend
that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an
SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and
better protection for your engine at extremely low
temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-19
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
5-20
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them are true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-21
To check or replace the filter, do the following:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the air filter.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
on page 6-4.
{CAUTION:
1. Release the two clips that hold the cover down.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
2. Lift the cover off.
3. Pull out the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Install a new engine air cleaner/filter, if needed.
5. Reinstall the cover.
5-22
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
When to Check and Change
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Check the fluid in the transaxle and differential every
30,000 miles (50 000 km). Change the fluid every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F
(70°C to 80°C).
How to Check
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
5-23
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
1. Release the tab and pull out the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transaxle
dipstick has an orange
handle and is located near
the front of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-24
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be between the
two dimples in the hot range.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then press the tab
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-26.
When to Check
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the area between dimples on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid because fluid
with that label is made especially for your automatic
transaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than T-IV
Automatic Transmission fluid is not covered by your
new vehicle warranty. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check” previously in
this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then press the tab
down to lock the dipstick in place.
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual transaxle
doesn’t require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose
to have this done at your Pontiac dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transaxle
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transaxle case.
5-25
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
Hydraulic Clutch
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
won’t correct a leak.
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-26.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
5-26
The clutch and brake master cylinder use the same
reservoir.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine
how often you should
check the fluid level in your
master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper
fluid. See Part B: Owner
Checks and Services
on page 6-19 and Part D:
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on
page 6-26.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Check to make sure that the fluid level is at or above
the MIN mark. If the level is below the MIN mark,
see the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Engine Coolant
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-30.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and the proper
coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (− 37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
5-27
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half half coolant that meets GM
Specification 1825-M, which won’t damage aluminum
parts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to
GM Specification 1825-M with a complete coolant
flush and refill. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t
need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
5-28
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a
level surface. When your
engine is cold, the
coolant level should be at
LOW, or a little higher.
When your engine is warm,
the level should be up to
FULL, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper coolant
mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not
to spill it.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-32.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: Your radiator cap is a 15.6 psi (110 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed
to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
5-29
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-33.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-30
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-31
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
5-32
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
mark. If it isn’t, you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If
the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If
it isn’t, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above the FULL mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and a proper coolant at
the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-27 for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
5-34
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-35
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-36
3. Fill the radiator with the proper coolant mixture, up
to the base of the filler neck. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27 for more information about the proper
coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper coolant mixture through the
filler neck until the level reaches the base of the
filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the ears on the pressure cap are in line with the
vent tube.
5-37
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
You can check your fluid without taking the cap off. Just
look at the reservoir.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-38
• When the engine compartment is hot, the level
should be between the HOT marks.
• When the engine compartment is cool, the level
should be between the COLD marks.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-26.
Notice: When adding power steering fluid or
making a complete fluid change, always use the
proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can
cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
Adding Washer Fluid
The low windshield washer
fluid level warning light will
come on when the fluid
level is too low. See
Low Washer Fluid Warning
Light on page 3-39.
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank is full.
Canada Only
5-39
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
5-40
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
United States
Canada
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-31.
5-41
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-26.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
5-42
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-89.
Brake Wear
The GT series has four-wheel disc brakes. All other
models have front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate
or heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust
correctly. If you drive in that way, then — very
carefully — make a few moderate brake stops about
every 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your brakes will
adjust properly.
5-43
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
5-44
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-45 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
neutral before setting the parking brake.
5-45
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren’t
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-46
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You
don’t need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle with the dead
battery has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect
the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-47
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative terminal of
the good battery.
Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5-48
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
5-49
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-50
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, it has two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-24.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
repaired, if needed.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.
5-51
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer. For the type of bulb to use,
see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-52
A. Headlamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
To replace the headlamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the hood and locate the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the rubber cover and socket from the
headlamp.
5-53
Front Turn Signal Lamps
To replace the front turn signal lamp bulbs, do the
following:
1. See Headlamps on page 5-52.
2. Locate the turn signal bulb.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp housing.
4. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.
3. Release the retainer clip holding the bulb by
pressing down and moving the metal retainer away
from you.
4. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
5. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.
5-54
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb, do
the following:
1. The bulb is located on the inside of the liftgate
liftglass near the top. Remove the two clips on
both sides of the cover and remove it.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
out of the lamp housing.
2. Unscrew the two screws from the CHMSL housing
and remove the housing to expose the bulb.
5-55
Rear Combination Lamps
To replace the turn signal and brake lamp bulbs, do the
following:
A. Brake Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.
5-56
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
pull it out of the
lamp housing.
1. Remove the storage compartment cover in the rear
cargo area of the vehicle to access the bulbs.
5-57
3. Pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamp bulb is
located below the rear
combination lamps.
4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the cover.
To replace the back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Reach up under the
rear fascia to locate the
back-up lamp
housing.
5-58
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
pull it out of the
lamp housing.
Replacement Bulbs
Lamps
Headlamp High-/Low-Beam
Front Turn Signal
Brake Lamp
Back-Up Lamps
Rear Turn Signal
CHMSL
Bulb Number
9003
1157NA
7443
7440
7440
921
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.
5-59
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-20 for
more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-60
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual and other
glove compartment literature.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
5-61
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into it’s
sidewall. The following illustration shows an example of
a passenger car tire sidewall.
5-62
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Tire Size
Department of Transportation (DOT)
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Ply Material
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire.
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies
in the sidewall and under the tread.
Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation — Tire
Pressure on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-32.
5-63
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version
of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle
tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire and
Rim Association.
Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire
section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements. For example, if the
tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
70% as high as it is wide.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Tire Width
Aspect Ratio
Belt Rating
Rim Diameter
Load Range
Speed Rating
5-64
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate the type
of ply construction in the tire. The letter “R” means
radial ply construction; the letter “D” means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the letter “B” means
belted-bias ply construction.
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Load Range: The load range represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry.
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a tire
is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range
from “A” to “Z”.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories, for example, automatic
transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires that hold the
tire onto the rim.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa), before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-67.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-65
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of
a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure
on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: The
maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may
be inflated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
5-66
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at substantially
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-70.
Tread Width: The width of the tire’s tread.
Inflation — Tire Pressure
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-72.
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg)
plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing original equipment tire size and
the recommended cold inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-67
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-68
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-70 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-74 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4 for scheduled
rotation intervals.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-101.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Tires should only be moved from front to rear and rear
to front on the same side of the vehicle.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-69
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-70
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look
at the tire and loading information label. For more
information about this label and where to find it, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Make sure the replacements are the same size,
load capacity, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
(Continued)
5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
selection width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear,
traction and temperature performance. (This applies
only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
5-72
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-73
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-77 for more
information.
5-74
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires for front-wheel-drive vehicles.
If your vehicle has all-wheel-drive, install the
tire chains on the front or all four tires but never on
the rear tires only. Tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
5-75
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-76
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack, wheel wrench, jack handle and spare tire are
stowed in the rear of the vehicle, underneath the
floor of the cargo area. To remove the spare tire and
tools do the following:
1. Turn the two lock
knobs on the floor of
the cargo area to
UNLOCK.
2. Lift up the cargo area floor panel, remove the hook
attached to the bottom side of the panel and hook it
over the weatherstripping.
5-78
Notice: Make sure to place the hook in the proper
location in order to avoid damaging the vehicle.
Be sure to remove the hook when finished and place
it back in its original position before closing the
liftgate.
3. Remove the jack from the tray on the right side of
the compartment and the jack handle and wheel
wrench from the top side of the compartment.
5. Unscrew the center bolt from the compact spare tire
and pull out the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-88 for more information about
the compact spare tire.
4. Unscrew the center retaining nut and lift up the
plastic tray to expose the compact spare tire.
5-79
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jack
handle (B) and wheel wrench (C).
6. Attach the jack handle to the jack.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the lift head.
5-80
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
2. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fit
over the car flange between the two notches.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-81
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
5-82
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
6. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-83
{CAUTION:
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
8. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-84
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Return the jack, jack handle and wheel wrench to the
storage area. The compact spare tire storage area
is designed only for the compact spare tire, the standard
tire cannot be stored there.
To store the flat tire do the following:
1. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
center wheel cap before storing the flat tire.
4. Hook the belts (end closest to the buckle) to the
rear, upper tie-down hooks.
2. Place the flat tire on the rear cargo area floor panel
with the outer side of the wheel facing up.
3. Use the tire tie-down belts located under the floor
panel to secure the flat tire.
5-85
5. Pass the belts through the center hole of the wheel.
6. Attach the other end of the belts to the rear,
lower tie-down hooks.
5-86
7. Position the tire edge against the rear center end of
the floor panel. Pull the end of the belts to make
sure the tire is secure.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Bolt
D. Spare Tire
E. Jack Handle
F. Nut
Return the jack, jack handle, wheel wrench and compact
spare tire to the storage area. When storing the
compact spare tire, put it in place with the inner side of
the wheel facing up. The compact spare tire storage
area is designed only for the compact spare tire,
the standard tire cannot be stored there.
5-87
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so
you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
5-88
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Carbon Tetrachloride
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
Gasoline
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-95.
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-89
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water and baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-90
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.
Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners
are used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
5-91
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least
every six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-26.
5-92
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is
to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-95.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-93
Aluminum Wheels
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
5-94
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Chemical Paint Spotting
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-26.
5-96
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
5-97
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses, circuit breakers and fusible
thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-98
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the
correct size.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without – like the radio or air conditioner – and use its
fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon as
you can.
Before replacing a fuse, turn every electrical switch off.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
STOP
DOOR
AM1
ECU-IG
RR WIPER
The instrument panel fuse block is located underneath
the instrument panel on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
Fuses
TAIL
OBD
WIPER
AM2
Usage
Front Parking Lamps, Taillamps,
License Plate Lamps, Instrument
Panel Lights, Engine Control System
On-Board Diagnostic System
Windshield Wipers
Charging System, Air Bag System,
Starter System, Engine Control
A/C
INV
P/POINT
ECU-B
CIG
GAUGE
WASHER
*1
Usage
Stop Lamps, CHMSL, Engine
Control System, Anti-lock Brakes,
Cruise Control
Power Door Locks, Liftglass Lock
Cigarette Lighter, Gauge, ECU-IG,
Wiper, Rear Wiper, Washer Fuses
Cruise Control, Anti-Lock Brakes,
Theft Deterrent System, Automatic
Transaxle Control System, Electric
Cooling Fan
Rear Window Wiper, Rear Window
Defogger
Air Conditioning
Power Outlets
Power Outlets
Daytime Running Lamps
Cigarette Lighter, Power Rearview
Mirrors, Power Outlets, Audio
System, Automatic Transaxle
Control System
Gauges and Meters, Back-Up
Lamps, Charging System, Power
Door Locks, Power Windows,
Sunroof, Air Conditioning, Cruise
Control
Windshield Washers
Engine Control System
5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
MAIN
AMP
MAYDAY
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ABS NO. 2
RDI FAN
ABS NO. 1
This engine compartment fuse block is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle
near the air cleaner. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
ALT
Fuses
HEAD MAIN
ALT-S
EFI
HAZARD
HORN
DOME
5-100
Usage
Right Headlamp, Left Headlamp
Fuses
Charging System
Electronic Fuel Injection System
Turn Signal Lamps, Emergency
Flasher
Horn
Interior Lights, Gauges and Meters,
Audio System, Remote Keyless
Entry System
HEAD RH
HEAD LH
FOG
Usage
Starter System, AM2 Fuse
Audio Amplifiers
Not Used
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Anti-lock Brake System
Electronic Cooling Fan System
Anti-lock Brake System
Charging System, DEFOG,
HEATER, GAUGE, ECU-IG,
WIPER, RR WIP, WASHER, ABS
NO. 1, ABS NO. 2, RDI FAN, FOG,
GAUGE, INV, AM1 Fuses
Right-hand Headlamp
Left-hand Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Relays
DIMMER
FAN NO. 2
FAN NO. 1
EFI
Usage
Headlamp Dimmer
Cooling Fan System
Cooling Fan System
Electronic Fuel Injection System
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
1.41 lbs
Metric
0.64 kg
Automatic Transaxle
1.8L Engine (Code 8)
1.8L Engine (Code 8) with AWD
1.8L Engine (Code L)
3.2 quarts
3.1 quarts
4.3 quarts
3.0 L
2.9 L
4.1 L
Cooling System
1.8L Engine (Code 8)
1.8L H.O. Engine (Code L)
6.9 quarts
7.1 quarts
6.5 L
6.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter
1.8L Engine (Code 8)
1.8L Engine (Code L)
3.9 quarts
4.8 quarts
3.7 L
4.4 L
11.9 gallons
13.2 gallons
45.0 L
50.0 L
Fuel Tank
With AWD
Without AWD
5-101
Capacities
Application
Manual Transaxle
Five-Speed
Six-Speed
Rear Differential
Transfer Case
English
Metric
2.0 quarts
2.4 quarts
1.9 L
2.3 L
0.5 quarts
0.8 quarts
0.5 L
0.8 L
Wheels and Tires
76 lb-ft
103 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.
Engine Specifications
5-102
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
L4
1.8L Engine
8
Automatic and Manual
0.043 inch (1.1 mm)
L4
1.8L H.O. DOHC Engine
L
Automatic and Manual
0.043 inch (1.1 mm)
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
Battery
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter (Code 8)
Engine Oil Filter (Code L)
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
PCV Valve
PCV Valve (Code 8 base model)
PCV Valve (Code 8 AWD Model)
PCV Valve (Code L)
Number
ACDelco® Part No. 19001602
GM Part No. 88969107
GM Part No. 88971573
GM Part No. 88969580
GM Part No. 88970273
GM Part No. 94859406
GM Part No. 94859404
GM Part No. 88969512
DENSO SK16R11, NGK IFR5A11
or GM Part No. 94859448
DENSO SK20R11,
NGK IFR6A11 or
GM Part No. 88969637
*Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engine
performance.
Spark Plugs
1.8 L Engine (Code 8)
1.8 L Engine (Code L)
5-103
✍ NOTES
5-104
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-7
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-14
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-19
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-19
At Least Once a Month .................................6-19
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-20
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-21
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-24
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-24
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-24
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-24
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-25
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-25
Brake System Inspection ................................6-25
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-26
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-28
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we don’t know exactly how
you’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few
times a week. Or you may drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
6-4
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on your vehicle’s tire
and loading information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-32.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation. Engine
Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty
conditions.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement. Transfer Case
Fluid Change (when trailer towing). Rear Differential
Fluid Change (when trailer towing).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap, Cap Gasket and
Lines Inspection (or every 24 months, whichever occurs
first). Automatic Transaxle Check. Manual Transaxle
Fluid Change (severe conditions only) (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). Cooling System
Service (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Fluid Change (severe conditions only). Valve Clearance
Inspection, adjust if necessary (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first).
6-5
At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Or 48 Months,
Whichever Occurs First) — Then Every 15,000 Miles
(25 000 km) (or 12 Months, Whichever Occurs
First): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 120,000 Miles (200 000 km): Spark Plug
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down
slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Tire Rotation.
6-6
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap, Cap Gasket and
Lines Inspection (or every 24 months, whichever occurs
first). Automatic Transaxle Fluid Check. Manual
Transaxle Fluid Change (severe conditions only) (or
every 24 months, whichever occurs first). Cooling System
Service (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Fluid Change (severe conditions only). Valve Clearance
Inspection, adjust if necessary (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first).
At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (or 48 Months,
Whichever Occurs First) — Then Every 15,000 Miles
(25 000 km) (or 12 Months, Whichever Occurs
First): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 120,000 Miles (200 000 km): Spark Plug
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The service shown at 120,000 miles
(200 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 120,000 miles (200 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-24.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
6-7
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-8
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
6-9
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-10
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjust
valve clearance to factory specifications if necessary
(or every 48 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles
(100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, check the fluid. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26 for the proper
fluid to use.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-11
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months
since last inspection). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent trailer
towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
6-12
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
12 months since last inspection). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.
❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent
trailer towing.
6-13
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
120,000 Miles (200 000 km)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 120,000 miles
(200 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 120,000 miles (200 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-24.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.
6-14
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-15
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjust
valve clearance to factory specifications if necessary
(or every 48 months, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-16
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles
(100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, check the fluid. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26 for the proper
fluid to use.
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months
since last inspection). An Emission Control Service.
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-17
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months
since last inspection). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
6-18
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a
trailer.
❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
120,000 Miles (200 000 km)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-39 for further
details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
Hood Latch Operation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Pull the primary hood latch release handle inside the
vehicle. The secondary latch should keep the hood from
opening all the way when the primary latch is released.
Make sure the hood closes firmly. See Hood Release
on page 5-10 for further details.
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
At Least Once a Month
Engine Oil Level Check
Tire Inflation Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-69 for further
details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-27 for further details.
6-19
At Least Twice a Year
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Restraint System Check
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-26.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-92.
6-20
Fluid Level Check
Check the power steering pump and automatic or
manual transaxle fluid levels and add as needed. See
Power Steering Fluid on page 5-38 and Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23 or Manual Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-25. Check for leaks. A fluid loss in these
systems could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Seat Operation Check
Make sure the head restraints stay in position and all
seat latches lock. Check that the recliner holds by
pushing and pulling the seatback while it is reclined.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try
to start the engine. The starter should work only
when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed
all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
6-21
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-27 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-22
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to
LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transaxle, the key should turn to
LOCK only if you push the key in farther, while
turning it toward LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-23
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-33.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
6-24
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
6-25
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
6-26
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water (preferably distilled) and good
quality Ethylene Glycol Base
Coolant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378560, in Canada 993089,
or equivalent) conforming to GM
Specification 1825M or approved
recycled coolant conforming to GM
Specification 1825M. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27.
Usage
Hydraulic Brake
System
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power Steering
System
Manual
Transaxle
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
See “Hydraulic Brake System.”
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
GM Goodwrench Synthetic Manual
Transmission Fluid (GM Part No.
U.S. 12346190, in Canada
10953477 — 1 quart) or SAE
75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid (GM Part No.
U.S. 88900925, in Canada
22689186). See Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Usage
Manual
Transaxle Shift
Linkage
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Floor Shift
Linkage
Chassis
Lubrication
Rear Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12345977, in Canada 10953482) or
SAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.
Usage
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12345977, in Canada 10953482) or
SAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-27
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-28
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-29
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-30
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ...........................................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps
One and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line
Program to enforce any additional rights you may have.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet for information on the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
7-3
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to
Pontiac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-ROADSIDE (1-800-762-3743)
As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road.
Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing
minor repair information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest
Pontiac dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel delivery
Lock-out service (identification required)
Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
Change a flat tire
Jump starts
We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers
of the following additional services depending on
your needs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hotels
Glass replacement
Tire repair facilities
Rental vehicle or taxis
Airports or train stations
Police, fire departments or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following information to give the advisor:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call
away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
or 1-800-762-3743, text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
7-7
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-8
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10
per day (five day maximum) may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you
with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and
may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion
of the repair.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not
part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information furnished with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Service Manuals
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-39
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-97
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-45, 3-54
Air Bag ......................................................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-30
Air Bag System, Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ............................................. 1-47
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-51
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-9
Aluminum Wheels ........................................... 5-94
AM ............................................................... 3-63
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-64
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 3-64
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-32
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-89
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-95
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-89
Appearance Care (cont.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Arming the System .........................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Navigation/Radio System ..............................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transaxle ........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
5-92
5-94
5-94
5-95
5-95
5-92
2-14
3-19
3-41
3-64
3-64
3-64
3-63
3-42
3-52
3-41
3-63
3-64
3-13
2-18
5-23
2-20
6-22
1
B
C
Backing Up .................................................... 4-38
Battery .......................................................... 5-44
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-21
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-21
Brake ............................................................ 2-27
Parking ...................................................... 2-27
System Inspection ....................................... 6-25
System Warning Light .................................. 3-31
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-40
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-43
Brakes .......................................................... 5-40
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-58
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-55
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamps ................................................. 5-52
Rear Combination Lamps ............................. 5-56
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-59
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-71
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-8
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-101
Carbon Monoxide ..................... 4-24, 4-34, 2-9, 2-33
Care of ......................................................... 5-92
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-64
Your CDs ................................................... 3-64
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-41
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-41
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module) .................................... 5-51
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-37
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-55
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-75
Charging System Light .................................... 3-31
Check ........................................................... 3-34
Engine Light ............................................... 3-34
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-28
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-56
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-95
2
Child Restraints ..............................................
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning ........................................................
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ....................................
Cleaning Glass Surfaces ..................................
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components .................
Cleaning Leather ............................................
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ...........
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................
1-33
1-33
1-29
1-39
1-27
1-41
1-42
1-44
1-36
1-38
1-36
3-19
5-89
5-89
5-92
5-95
5-92
5-93
5-89
5-91
5-91
5-91
5-91
5-91
Climate Control System ................................... 3-19
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-23
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-22
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-26
Coinholder(s) .................................................. 2-37
Compact Disc Messages .......................... 3-51, 3-62
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-88
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-13
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant ......................................................... 3-33
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-33
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19
Cooling System .............................................. 5-32
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-8
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-39
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-37
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information ........................ 7-8
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-10
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-13
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-21
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-31
Disarming the System ..................................... 2-15
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-32
Door ............................................................. 3-39
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-39
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Driver ............................................................ 1-14
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driving .......................................................... 4-15
At Night ..................................................... 4-15
City ........................................................... 4-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-20
4
Driving (cont.)
Hill and Mountain Roads ..............................
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...........................
Winter ........................................................
Driving On Grades ..........................................
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...............
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
Driving with a Trailer .......................................
4-22
4-16
4-24
4-39
4-24
4-18
4-18
4-38
E
Electrical System ............................................
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine ..........................................................
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Coolant ......................................................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
5-97
5-97
5-98
5-98
5-98
5-98
3-37
5-21
5-21
5-44
3-34
2-19
3-33
5-27
6-25
5-12
Engine (cont.)
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Overheating ................................................ 5-30
Starting ...................................................... 2-18
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ..................... 5-100
Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-19
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-40
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-19
Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-19
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-15
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-26
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12
F
Filter .............................................................
Engine Air Cleaner ......................................
Finding a PTY Station .....................................
Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™) .............
Finding a Station .................................... 3-43,
Finish Care ....................................................
Finish Damage ...............................................
Five-Speed ....................................................
5-21
5-21
3-55
3-45
3-53
5-93
5-94
2-23
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-64
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-6
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-76
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-77
Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-37
Fluid ............................................................. 5-23
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-23
Manual Transaxle ........................................ 5-25
Power Steering ........................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-39
Fluid Level Check ........................................... 6-20
FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-63
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-5
Following Distance .......................................... 4-38
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-40
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
System Inspection ....................................... 6-24
Fuses ........................................................... 5-98
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98
5
G
Gage ............................................................ 3-33
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-33
Fuel .......................................................... 3-40
Speedometer .............................................. 3-27
Tachometer ................................................. 3-28
Gasoline ......................................................... 5-4
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-37
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-6
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-98
Headlamps .................................................... 5-52
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamps On Reminder ................................. 3-13
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
Hitches .......................................................... 4-37
6
Hood ............................................................ 5-10
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Hood Latch Operation Check ............................ 6-19
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How the System Alarm is Activated ................... 2-15
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-34
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-36
How to Add Fluid .................................... 5-25, 5-26
How to Check ................................ 5-23, 5-25, 5-68
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 5-27
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-38
How to Remove and Replace the Floor Mat ....... 2-38
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-26
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-18
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ..........
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...............
If the Light Is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .......
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
Ignition Positions .............................................
5-31
5-30
3-35
3-36
4-28
4-35
4-26
2-16
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .......................... 6-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29
Inflation — Tire Pressure ................................. 5-67
Inspection ...................................................... 6-25
Brake System ............................................. 6-25
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-25
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-24
Fuel System ............................................... 6-24
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-24
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-24
Throttle System ........................................... 6-25
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-26
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Storage Area .............................................. 2-37
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-14
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-99
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-14
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-45
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-21
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Lamps ........................................................... 3-12
Exterior ...................................................... 3-12
Interior ....................................................... 3-14
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-14, 1-23
LATCH System ............................................... 1-39
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-39
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-41
Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running ..................................................... 2-29
Liftgate/Liftglass ................................................ 2-9
Liftgate/Liftglass Release .................................. 2-10
Liftglass/Liftgate ................................................ 2-9
Light ............................................................. 3-30
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-30
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-32
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-31
Charging System ......................................... 3-31
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-39
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-39
Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-39
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-34
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Overdrive Off .............................................. 3-39
7
Light (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-32
Locks ............................................................. 2-7
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle ..................................... 2-9
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Long Trip/Highway Definition .............................. 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals ............................... 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-14
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-39
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-38
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-103
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-19
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-19
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-19
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-21
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-20
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-25
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-25
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-24
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-24
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-14
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-19
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-24
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-26
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-28
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-7
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-24
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-25
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-40
Making Turns ................................................. 4-38
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-34
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transaxle ............................................ 2-18
Fluid .......................................................... 5-25
Operation ................................................... 2-23
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-11
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ....... 7-5
Mirrors .......................................................... 2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Mirrors (cont.)
Outside Remote Control Mirrors ..................... 2-36
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
Navigation/Radio System .................................. 3-63
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-103
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil ................................................................ 5-16
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-38
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-27
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
Operation ...................................................... 3-19
Operation Tips ................................................ 3-22
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22
Outside ......................................................... 2-36
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Remote Controls Mirrors ............................... 2-36
Overdrive Off ................................................. 2-22
Overdrive Off Light .......................................... 3-39
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
P
Park (P) ........................................................ 2-30
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30
Parking ......................................................... 2-27
Brake ........................................................ 2-27
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P)
Mechanism Check ....................................... 6-23
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-39
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-31
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-19
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-24
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-26
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-28
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-23
Passing ................................................. 4-12, 4-38
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8
Playing a Compact Disc .......................... 3-50, 3-57
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact Disc ............................................. 3-59
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-43, 3-52
Power Steering ................................................ 4-9
9
Power ........................................................... 3-17
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ................. 3-18
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38
Windows .................................................... 2-12
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-26
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ....................................
Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-42,
Radio Messages .............................................
Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Navigation/Radio System ..............................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Understanding Reception ..............................
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-46,
10
5-29
3-55
3-47
3-41
3-64
3-64
3-63
3-42
3-52
3-41
3-63
3-56
Reactivating the System .................................. 2-15
Reading Lamp ................................................ 3-16
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ................. 2-40
Rear Combination Lamps ................................. 5-56
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Passenger Positions ......................... 1-22
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-40
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-21
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-35
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-30
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-78
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-59
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-44
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ..................................................... 1-57
Reporting Safety Defects ................................. 7-10
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-20
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-56
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-57
Restraint Systems ........................................... 1-56
Checking .................................................... 1-56
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-57
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-22
Roadside ......................................................... 7-6
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-28
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34
S
Safety Belt ..................................................... 1-26
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-26
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts ................................................... 5-92
Care of ...................................................... 5-92
Driver Position ............................................ 1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-22
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-22
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-37
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seat Operation Check ..................................... 6-21
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-5
Seats .............................................................. 1-3
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-5
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3
Securing a Child Restraint ................................ 1-41
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-41
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-42
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-34
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ............... 3-46, 3-56
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-44, 3-53
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-41
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-44, 3-54
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-94
Shift Speeds .................................................. 2-26
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28
11
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30
Short Trip/City Definition .................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ..................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-7
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-16
Six-Speed ...................................................... 2-24
Skidding ........................................................ 4-14
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-18
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-90
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-101
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-21
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection ..................................... 6-24
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-37
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-37
Coinholder(s) .............................................. 2-37
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-37
Glove Box .................................................. 2-37
Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-37
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-38
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System .............. 2-40
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-40
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-85
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-87
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28
12
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...............
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ....................
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ....................
What Will You See After an Air
Bag Inflates? ...........................................
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ...................
Where Are the Air Bags? ..............................
2-13
2-42
1-47
1-53
1-56
1-53
1-54
1-52
1-50
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-28
Temperature Display ........................................ 3-28
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-13
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-13
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-25
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-19
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-62
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-64
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-65
Tires ..................................................... 5-61, 5-94
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-71
Chains ....................................................... 5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-77
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-88
Tires (cont.)
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-76
Inflation — Tire Pressure .............................. 5-67
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-73
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-70
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-19
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-36
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-38
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-30
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-36
Towing .......................................................... 4-30
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-30
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-34
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-30
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-37
Transaxle ....................................................... 5-23
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-25
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-20
Transaxle Operation, Manual ............................ 2-23
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) .................. 5-51
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trip Odometers .............................................. 3-27
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-39
U
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-23
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-63
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-75
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-90
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-61
Using the Recovery Hook ................................ 4-29
V
Vehicle ............................................................ 4-5
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-32
Parking Your ............................................... 2-31
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Identification ........................................ 5-97
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-97
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-44
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22
Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-13
Visors ........................................................... 2-13
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25
Warnings ......................................................... 3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-39
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-92
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-20
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-36
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-35
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-18
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-21
What to Use .................................. 5-28, 5-38, 5-39
Wheels .......................................................... 5-73
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-73
Replacement ............................................... 5-74
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-17
When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 5-20
When to Check ...................................... 5-25, 5-68
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-23
When to Check and What to Use ..................... 5-27
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-38
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill ..................................................... 4-40
14
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-36
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-10
Windows ....................................................... 2-11
Manual ...................................................... 2-11
Power ........................................................ 2-12
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades ........... 5-93
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-8
Fluid .......................................................... 5-39
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-19
Windshield Wiper ............................................ 5-60
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-60
Fuses ........................................................ 5-98
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-20
X
XM™ Radio Satellite Service (USA Only) ........... 3-42
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-64
XM™ Satellite Radio Service (USA Only) ........... 3-64
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2